blob: 9dff44acfb237569dc35d9696e92e79bb7d8ba0e [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreauda618cb2010-03-17 23:41:57 +01005 version 1.4.2
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreauda618cb2010-03-17 23:41:57 +01007 2010/03/17
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100453.4. Userlists
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046
474. Proxies
484.1. Proxy keywords matrix
494.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
50
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100515. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052
536. HTTP header manipulation
54
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100557. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200567.1. Matching integers
577.2. Matching strings
587.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
597.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
607.5. Available matching criteria
617.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
627.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
637.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
647.6. Pre-defined ACLs
657.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100667.8. Pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067
688. Logging
698.1. Log levels
708.2. Log formats
718.2.1. Default log format
728.2.2. TCP log format
738.2.3. HTTP log format
748.3. Advanced logging options
758.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
768.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
778.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
788.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
798.4. Timing events
808.5. Session state at disconnection
818.6. Non-printable characters
828.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
838.8. Capturing HTTP headers
848.9. Examples of logs
85
869. Statistics and monitoring
879.1. CSV format
889.2. Unix Socket commands
89
90
911. Quick reminder about HTTP
92----------------------------
93
94When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
95fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
96on almost anything found in the contents.
97
98However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
99formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
100correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
101
102
1031.1. The HTTP transaction model
104-------------------------------
105
106The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100107to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200108from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
109connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
110will involve a new connection :
111
112 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
113
114In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
115establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
116by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
117length.
118
119Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
120to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
121however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
122response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
123header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
124
125 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
126
127Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
128power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
129but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +0100130a smaller value. HAProxy currently only supports the HTTP keep-alive mode on
131the client side, and transforms it to a close mode on the server side.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200132
133A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
134keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
135second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
136page :
137
138 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
139
140This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
141latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
142correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
143the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100144server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
145HAProxy supports pipelined requests on the client side and processes them one
146at a time.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200147
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200148
1491.2. HTTP request
150-----------------
151
152First, let's consider this HTTP request :
153
154 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100155 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200156 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
157 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
158 3 User-agent: my small browser
159 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
160 5 Accept: image/png
161
162
1631.2.1. The Request line
164-----------------------
165
166Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
167
168 - a METHOD : GET
169 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
170 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
171
172All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
173which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
174followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
175is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
176desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
177the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
178
179The URI itself can have several forms :
180
181 - A "relative URI" :
182
183 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
184
185 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
186 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
187
188 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
189
190 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
191
192 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
193 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
194 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
195 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
196 must accept this form too.
197
198 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
199 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
200 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100201
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200202 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
203 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
204 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
205 other protocols too.
206
207In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
208mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
209on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
210It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
211specific to the language, framework or application in use.
212
213
2141.2.2. The request headers
215--------------------------
216
217The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
218beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
219an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
220Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
221values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
222encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
223the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
224define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
225
226Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
227their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
228"Connection:" header).
229
230The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
231that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
232is one valid form of empty line.
233
234Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
235headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
236about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
237application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
238
239Important note:
240 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
241 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
242 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
243 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
244
245
2461.3. HTTP response
247------------------
248
249An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
250messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
251
252 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100253 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200254 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
255 2 Content-length: 350
256 3 Content-Type: text/html
257
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200258As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
259codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
260response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100261continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
262the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
263following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
264sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
265(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
266correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
267such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
268state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
269over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
270if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
271information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200273
2741.3.1. The Response line
275------------------------
276
277Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
278
279 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
280 - a status code : 200
281 - a reason : OK
282
283The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200284 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200285 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
286 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
287 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
288 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
289
290Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100291"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200292found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
293messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
294or "Authentication Required".
295
296Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
297
298 Code When / reason
299 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
300 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
301 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
303 400 for an invalid or too large request
304 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
305 accessing the stats page)
306 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
307 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
308 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
309 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
310 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
311 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
312 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
313 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
314 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
315
316The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3174.2).
318
319
3201.3.2. The response headers
321---------------------------
322
323Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
324the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
325details.
326
327
3282. Configuring HAProxy
329----------------------
330
3312.1. Configuration file format
332------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200333
334HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
335
336 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
337 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
338 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
339 "frontend" and "backend".
340
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100341The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
342referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
343delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100344preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100345escaped by doubling them.
346
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200347
3482.2. Time format
349----------------
350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100351Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100352values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
353otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
354numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
355for every keyword. Supported units are :
356
357 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
358 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
359 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
360 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
361 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
362 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
363
364
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003653. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200366--------------------
367
368Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
369are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
370of them have command-line equivalents.
371
372The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
373
374 * Process management and security
375 - chroot
376 - daemon
377 - gid
378 - group
379 - log
380 - nbproc
381 - pidfile
382 - uid
383 - ulimit-n
384 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200385 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200386 - node
387 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100388
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200389 * Performance tuning
390 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100391 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200392 - noepoll
393 - nokqueue
394 - nopoll
395 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100396 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200397 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200398 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100399 - tune.maxaccept
400 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200401 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100402 - tune.rcvbuf.client
403 - tune.rcvbuf.server
404 - tune.sndbuf.client
405 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100406
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200407 * Debugging
408 - debug
409 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200410
411
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004123.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200413------------------------------------
414
415chroot <jail dir>
416 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
417 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
418 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
419 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
420 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
421 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100422
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200423daemon
424 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
425 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
426 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
427
428gid <number>
429 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
430 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
431 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
432 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100433
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200434group <group name>
435 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
436 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100437
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200438log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200439 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
440 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100441 configured with "log global".
442
443 <address> can be one of:
444
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100445 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100446 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
447 port).
448
449 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
450 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
451 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
452 writeable).
453
454 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200455
456 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
457 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
458 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
459
460 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200461 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
462 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
463 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
464 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
465 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
466 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200467
468 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
469
470nbproc <number>
471 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
472 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
473 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
474 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
475 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
476
477pidfile <pidfile>
478 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
479 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
480 starting the process. See also "daemon".
481
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200482stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200483 [level <level>]
484
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200485 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
486 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100487 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200488 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
489
490 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
491 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
492 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
493 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
494 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
495
496 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
497 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
498 counters).
499
500 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
501 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100502
503 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
504 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
505 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
506 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
507 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
508 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
509 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200510
511stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
512 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
513 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100514 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200515
516stats maxconn <connections>
517 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
518 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
519
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200520uid <number>
521 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
522 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
523 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
524 one. See also "gid" and "user".
525
526ulimit-n <number>
527 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
528 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
529 option.
530
531user <user name>
532 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
533 See also "uid" and "group".
534
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200535node <name>
536 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
537
538 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
539 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
540 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
541 traffic.
542
543description <text>
544 Add a text that describes the instance.
545
546 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
547 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
548 "<" and ">" characters.
549
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200550
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005513.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200552-----------------------
553
554maxconn <number>
555 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
556 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
557 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
558 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
559
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100560maxpipes <number>
561 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
562 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
563 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
564 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
565 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
566 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
567
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200568noepoll
569 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
570 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
571 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
572
573nokqueue
574 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
575 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
576 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
577
578nopoll
579 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
580 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100581 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200582 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
583 "nokqueue".
584
585nosepoll
586 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
587 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
588 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
589
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100590nosplice
591 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
592 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
593 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100594 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100595 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
596 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
597 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
598 "option splice-response".
599
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200600spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
601 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
602 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
603 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
604 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
605 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
606
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200607tune.bufsize <number>
608 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
609 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
610 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
611 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
612 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
613 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
614 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
615 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
616
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100617tune.maxaccept <number>
618 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
619 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
620 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100621 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100622 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
623 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100624 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100625 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
626
627tune.maxpollevents <number>
628 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
629 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
630 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
631 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
632 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
633
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200634tune.maxrewrite <number>
635 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
636 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
637 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
638 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
639 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
640 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
641 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
642 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
643 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
644 bufsize.
645
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100646tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
647tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
648 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
649 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
650 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
651 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
652 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
653 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
654 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
655
656tune.sndbuf.client <number>
657tune.sndbuf.server <number>
658 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
659 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
660 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
661 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
662 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
663 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
664 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
665 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
666 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
667 notifying haproxy again.
668
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200669
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006703.3. Debugging
671--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200672
673debug
674 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
675 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
676 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
677 system startup.
678
679quiet
680 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
681 line argument "-q".
682
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006833.4. Userlists
684--------------
685It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
686http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
687it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
688
689userlist <listname>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100690 Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many independent userlists can be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100691 used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
692
693group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100694 Adds group <groupname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100695 attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
696 proceeded by "users" keyword.
697
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100698user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>]
699 [groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100700 Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
701 insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +0100702 evaluated using the crypt(3) function so depending of the system's
703 capabilities, different algorithms are supported. For example modern Glibc
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100704 based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
705 DES-based method of crypting passwords.
706
707
708 Example:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100709 userlist L1
710 group G1 users tiger,scott
711 group G2 users xdb,scott
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100712
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100713 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za9667qe4(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
714 user scott insecure-password elgato
715 user xdb insecure-password hello
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100716
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100717 userlist L2
718 group G1
719 group G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100720
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100721 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
722 user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
723 user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100724
725 Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200726
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007274. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200728----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100729
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200730Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
731 - defaults <name>
732 - frontend <name>
733 - backend <name>
734 - listen <name>
735
736A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
737its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
738section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100739section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200740
741A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
742connections.
743
744A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
745to forward incoming connections.
746
747A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
748parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
749
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100750All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
751'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
752case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
753
754Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
755logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
756proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
757However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
758name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
759
760Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
761and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100762bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100763protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
764modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
765arbitrary criteria.
766
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100767
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007684.1. Proxy keywords matrix
769--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100770
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200771The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
772limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
773they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
774limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100775marked with "(*)" can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200776option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200777and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
778with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
779specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100780
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200781
Willy Tarreau5c6f7b32010-02-26 13:34:29 +0100782 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
783------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
784acl - X X X
785appsession - - X X
786backlog X X X -
787balance X - X X
788bind - X X -
789bind-process X X X X
790block - X X X
791capture cookie - X X -
792capture request header - X X -
793capture response header - X X -
794clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
795contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
796cookie X - X X
797default-server X - X X
798default_backend X X X -
799description - X X X
800disabled X X X X
801dispatch - - X X
802enabled X X X X
803errorfile X X X X
804errorloc X X X X
805errorloc302 X X X X
806-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
807errorloc303 X X X X
808fullconn X - X X
809grace X X X X
810hash-type X - X X
811http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
812http-request - X X X
813id - X X X
814log X X X X
815maxconn X X X -
816mode X X X X
817monitor fail - X X -
818monitor-net X X X -
819monitor-uri X X X -
820option abortonclose (*) X - X X
821option accept-invalid-http-request (*) X X X -
822option accept-invalid-http-response (*) X - X X
823option allbackups (*) X - X X
824option checkcache (*) X - X X
825option clitcpka (*) X X X -
826option contstats (*) X X X -
827option dontlog-normal (*) X X X -
828option dontlognull (*) X X X -
829option forceclose (*) X X X X
830-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
831option forwardfor X X X X
832option http-server-close (*) X X X X
833option http-use-proxy-header (*) X X X -
834option httpchk X - X X
835option httpclose (*) X X X X
836option httplog X X X X
837option http_proxy (*) X X X X
838option independant-streams (*) X X X X
839option log-health-checks (*) X - X X
840option log-separate-errors (*) X X X -
841option logasap (*) X X X -
842option mysql-check X - X X
843option nolinger (*) X X X X
844option originalto X X X X
845option persist (*) X - X X
846option redispatch (*) X - X X
847option smtpchk X - X X
848option socket-stats (*) X X X -
849option splice-auto (*) X X X X
850option splice-request (*) X X X X
851option splice-response (*) X X X X
852option srvtcpka (*) X - X X
853option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
854-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
855option tcp-smart-accept (*) X X X -
856option tcp-smart-connect (*) X - X X
857option tcpka X X X X
858option tcplog X X X X
859option transparent (*) X - X X
860persist rdp-cookie X - X X
861rate-limit sessions X X X -
862redirect - X X X
863redisp (deprecated) X - X X
864redispatch (deprecated) X - X X
865reqadd - X X X
866reqallow - X X X
867reqdel - X X X
868reqdeny - X X X
869reqiallow - X X X
870reqidel - X X X
871reqideny - X X X
872reqipass - X X X
873reqirep - X X X
874reqisetbe - X X X
875reqitarpit - X X X
876reqpass - X X X
877reqrep - X X X
878-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
879reqsetbe - X X X
880reqtarpit - X X X
881retries X - X X
882rspadd - X X X
883rspdel - X X X
884rspdeny - X X X
885rspidel - X X X
886rspideny - X X X
887rspirep - X X X
888rsprep - X X X
889server - - X X
890source X - X X
891srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
892stats auth X - X X
893stats enable X - X X
894stats hide-version X - X X
895stats realm X - X X
896stats refresh X - X X
897stats scope X - X X
898stats show-desc X - X X
899stats show-legends X - X X
900stats show-node X - X X
901stats uri X - X X
902-- keyword -------------------------- defaults - frontend - listen -- backend -
903stick match - - X X
904stick on - - X X
905stick store-request - - X X
906stick-table - - X X
907tcp-request content accept - X X -
908tcp-request content reject - X X -
909tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
910timeout check X - X X
911timeout client X X X -
912timeout clitimeout (deprecated) X X X -
913timeout connect X - X X
914timeout contimeout (deprecated) X - X X
915timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
916timeout http-request X X X X
917timeout queue X - X X
918timeout server X - X X
919timeout srvtimeout (deprecated) X - X X
920timeout tarpit X X X X
921transparent (deprecated) X - X X
922use_backend - X X -
923------------------------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
924 keyword defaults frontend listen backend
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200925
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100926
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02009274.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
928---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100929
930This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
931
932
933acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
934 Declare or complete an access list.
935 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
936 no | yes | yes | yes
937 Example:
938 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
939 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
940 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
941
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200942 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100943
944
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100945appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
946 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100947 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
948 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
949 no | no | yes | yes
950 Arguments :
951 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
952 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
953
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100954 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100955 checked in each cookie value.
956
957 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
958 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
959 milliseconds.
960
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200961 request-learn
962 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
963 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
964 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
965 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
966 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
967 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
968
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100969 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
970 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
971 data following this prefix.
972
973 Example :
974 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
975
976 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
977 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
978
979 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
980 2 modes are currently supported :
981 - path-parameters :
982 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
983 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
984 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
985 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
986 - query-string :
987 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
988 query string.
989
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100990 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
991 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
992 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
993 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100994 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
995 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
996 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100997 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
998 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
999
1000 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
1001
1002 Example :
1003 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
1004
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01001005 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick" and "stick-table".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001006
1007
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +01001008backlog <conns>
1009 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
1010 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1011 yes | yes | yes | no
1012 Arguments :
1013 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
1014 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
1015 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
1016
1017 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
1018 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
1019 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
1020 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
1021 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
1022 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
1023 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
1024 backlog parameter.
1025
1026 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
1027 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
1028 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
1029
1030 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
1031
1032
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001033balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001034balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001035 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
1036 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1037 yes | no | yes | yes
1038 Arguments :
1039 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
1040 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
1041 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
1042 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1043
1044 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1045 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1046 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1047 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001048 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1049 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1050 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1051 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1052 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1053 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1054 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1055 it, so that you don't worry.
1056
1057 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1058 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1059 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1060 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1061 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1062 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1063 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1064 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001065
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001066 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1067 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1068 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1069 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1070 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1071 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1072 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1073 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1074
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001075 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1076 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1077 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1078 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1079 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1080 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1081 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1082 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001083 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001084 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001085 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1086 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1087 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001088
1089 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1090 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1091 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1092 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1093 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1094 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1095 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001096 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1097 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1098 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001099
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001100 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1101 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1102 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1103 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1104 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1105 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1106 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1107 URIs start with a leading "/".
1108
1109 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1110 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1111 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1112 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1113
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001114 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001115 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1116
1117 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1118 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1119 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1120 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1121 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1122 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1123 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1124 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1125 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1126 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1127 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1128 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1129 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1130 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1131 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1132 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1133 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1134 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1135 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1136 be randomly balanced if at all.
1137
1138 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1139 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1140 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1141 server will receive the request.
1142
1143 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1144 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1145 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1146 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1147 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001148 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1149 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1150 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001151
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001152 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1153 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1154 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001155 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001156 algorithm is applied instead.
1157
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001158 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001159 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1160 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1161 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1162
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001163 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1164 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1165 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1166
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001167 rdp-cookie
1168 rdp-cookie(name)
1169 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1170 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1171 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1172 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1173 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1174 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001175 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001176 used instead.
1177
1178 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1179 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1180 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1181 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1182
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001183 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1184 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1185 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1186
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001187 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001188 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1189 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001190
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001191 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001192 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001193
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001194 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1195 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1196 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001197
1198 Examples :
1199 balance roundrobin
1200 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001201 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001202 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1203 balance hdr(host)
1204 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001205
1206 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1207 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1208
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001209 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001210 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1211 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1212 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1213 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1214
1215 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1216 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1217 defaults to 16 kB.
1218
1219 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1220 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1221
1222 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1223 Round Robin.
1224
1225 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1226 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1227 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1228 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1229
1230 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1231
1232 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001233 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001234 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1235 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1236 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001237
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001238 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1239 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001240
1241
1242bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...]
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001243bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] interface <interface>
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001244bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001245bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] transparent
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001246bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] id <id>
1247bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] name <name>
Willy Tarreau53319c92009-11-28 08:21:29 +01001248bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001249 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1250 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1251 no | yes | yes | no
1252 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001253 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1254 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1255 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1256 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1257 special address "0.0.0.0".
1258
1259 <port> is the TCP port number the proxy will listen on. The port is
1260 mandatory. Note that in the case of an IPv6 address, the port
1261 is always the number after the last colon (':').
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001262
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001263 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1264 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1265 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1266 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1267 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1268 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1269 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1270 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1271 privileges.
1272
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001273 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1274 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1275 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1276 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1277 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1278 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1279 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1280 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1281
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001282 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1283 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1284 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1285 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001286
1287 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1288
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001289 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1290 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1291 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001292 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001293 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1294 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1295 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1296 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1297 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001298
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001299 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1300 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1301 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1302 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1303 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1304 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1305 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1306 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1307 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1308 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1309 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1310 with front firewalls which would see an established
1311 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1312
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001313 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1314 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1315 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1316 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1317 in a frontend.
1318
1319 Example :
1320 listen http_proxy
1321 bind :80,:443
1322 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1323
1324 See also : "source".
1325
1326
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001327bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1328 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1329 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1330 yes | yes | yes | yes
1331 Arguments :
1332 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1333 may be used to override a default value.
1334
1335 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1336 option may be combined with other numbers.
1337
1338 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1339 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1340 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1341 missing from all processes.
1342
1343 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1344 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1345 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1346 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1347
1348 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1349 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1350 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1351 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1352 and 'even' instances.
1353
1354 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1355 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1356 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1357 32.
1358
1359 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1360 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1361
1362 Example :
1363 listen app_ip1
1364 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1365 bind_process odd
1366
1367 listen app_ip2
1368 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1369 bind_process even
1370
1371 listen management
1372 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1373 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1374
1375 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1376
1377
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001378block { if | unless } <condition>
1379 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1380 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1381 no | yes | yes | yes
1382
1383 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1384 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001385 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001386 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1387 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1388 "block" statements per instance.
1389
1390 Example:
1391 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1392 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1393 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1394 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1395
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001396 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001397
1398
1399capture cookie <name> len <length>
1400 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1401 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1402 no | yes | yes | no
1403 Arguments :
1404 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1405 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1406 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1407 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1408 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1409
1410 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1411 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1412 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1413 right if it exceeds <length>.
1414
1415 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1416 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1417 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1418 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1419
1420 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1421 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1422 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1423
1424 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1425 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1426 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1427 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001428 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001429 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1430
1431 Example:
1432 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1433
1434 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001435 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001436
1437
1438capture request header <name> len <length>
1439 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1440 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1441 no | yes | yes | no
1442 Arguments :
1443 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001444 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001445 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1446 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1447 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1448
1449 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1450 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1451 it exceeds <length>.
1452
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001453 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001454 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1455 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001456 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1457 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1458 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1459 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001460 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001461 environments to find where the request came from.
1462
1463 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1464 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1465 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1466 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001467
1468 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1469 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1470 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1471 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1472
1473 Example:
1474 capture request header Host len 15
1475 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1476 capture request header Referrer len 15
1477
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001478 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001479 about logging.
1480
1481
1482capture response header <name> len <length>
1483 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1484 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1485 no | yes | yes | no
1486 Arguments :
1487 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001488 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001489 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1490 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1491 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1492
1493 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1494 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1495 it exceeds <length>.
1496
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001497 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001498 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1499 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1500 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001501 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1502 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1503 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1504 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001505
1506 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1507 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1508 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1509 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1510
1511 Example:
1512 capture response header Content-length len 9
1513 capture response header Location len 15
1514
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001515 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001516 about logging.
1517
1518
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001519clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001520 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1521 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1522 yes | yes | yes | no
1523 Arguments :
1524 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1525 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1526 as explained at the top of this document.
1527
1528 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1529 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1530 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1531 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1532 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1533 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1534 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1535 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001536 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001537 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1538 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1539
1540 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1541 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1542 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1543 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1544 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1545 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1546
1547 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1548 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1549
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001550 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1551 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001552
1553
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001554contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001555 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1556 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1557 yes | no | yes | yes
1558 Arguments :
1559 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1560 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1561 as explained at the top of this document.
1562
1563 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001564 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001565 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001566 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1567 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1568 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1569 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1570
1571 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1572 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1573 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1574 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1575 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1576 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1577
1578 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1579 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1580 instead.
1581
1582 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1583 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1584
1585
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001586cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001587 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001588 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1589 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1590 yes | no | yes | yes
1591 Arguments :
1592 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1593 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1594 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1595 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1596 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1597 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1598 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1599 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1600 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1601
1602 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1603 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1604 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1605 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1606 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1607 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1608 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1609 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1610 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1611 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1612 "insert" and "prefix".
1613
1614 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1615 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1616 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1617 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1618 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1619 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1620 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1621 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1622 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1623
1624 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1625 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1626 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1627 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1628 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1629 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1630 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1631 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1632 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1633 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1634 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1635
1636 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1637 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1638 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1639 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1640 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1641 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1642 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1643 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1644 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1645 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1646
1647 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1648 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1649 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1650 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1651 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1652 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1653 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1654 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1655 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1656
1657 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1658 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1659 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1660 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1661 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1662 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1663 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1664 persistence cookie in the cache.
1665 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1666
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001667 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001668 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001669 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1670 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1671 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1672 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1673 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1674 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001675
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001676 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1677 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1678 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1679 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001680
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001681 Examples :
1682 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1683 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1684 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1685
1686 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server".
1687
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001688
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001689default-server [param*]
1690 Change default options for a server in a backend
1691 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1692 yes | no | yes | yes
1693 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001694 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1695 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1696 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1697 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001698
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001699 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001700 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1701
1702 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001703
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001704
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001705default_backend <backend>
1706 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1707 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1708 yes | yes | yes | no
1709 Arguments :
1710 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1711
1712 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1713 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1714 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1715 will catch all undetermined requests.
1716
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001717 Example :
1718
1719 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1720 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1721 default_backend dynamic
1722
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001723 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1724
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001725
1726disabled
1727 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1728 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1729 yes | yes | yes | yes
1730 Arguments : none
1731
1732 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1733 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1734 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1735 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1736 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1737 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1738 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1739
1740 See also : "enabled"
1741
1742
1743enabled
1744 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1745 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1746 yes | yes | yes | yes
1747 Arguments : none
1748
1749 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1750 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1751
1752 See also : "disabled"
1753
1754
1755errorfile <code> <file>
1756 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1757 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1758 yes | yes | yes | yes
1759 Arguments :
1760 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1761 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1762
1763 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001764 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001765 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001766 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1767 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001768
1769 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1770 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1771 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1772
1773 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1774 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1775 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1776 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1777
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001778 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1779 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1780 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1781 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1782 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1783 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1784
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001785 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1786 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1787 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001788 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001789 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1790
1791 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1792
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001793 Example :
1794 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1795 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1796 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1797
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001798
1799errorloc <code> <url>
1800errorloc302 <code> <url>
1801 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1802 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1803 yes | yes | yes | yes
1804 Arguments :
1805 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1806 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1807
1808 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1809 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1810 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1811 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1812 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1813
1814 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1815 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1816 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1817
1818 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1819 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1820 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1821 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1822 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1823 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1824 request.
1825
1826 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1827
1828
1829errorloc303 <code> <url>
1830 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1831 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1832 yes | yes | yes | yes
1833 Arguments :
1834 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1835 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1836
1837 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1838 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1839 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1840 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1841 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1842
1843 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1844 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1845 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1846
1847 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1848 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1849 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1850 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001851 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001852
1853 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1854
1855
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001856force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1857 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1858 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1859 no | yes | yes | yes
1860
1861 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1862 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1863 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1864 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1865 marked down for maintenance operations.
1866
1867 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1868 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1869 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1870 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1871 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1872 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1873 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1874 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1875 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1876
1877 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1878 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1879 is used.
1880
1881 See also : "option redispatch", "persist", and section 7 about ACL usage.
1882
1883
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001884fullconn <conns>
1885 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1886 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1887 yes | no | yes | yes
1888 Arguments :
1889 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1890 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1891
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001892 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001893 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001894 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001895 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1896 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1897 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1898 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1899 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001900 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001901
1902 Example :
1903 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1904 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1905 # connections.
1906 backend dynamic
1907 fullconn 10000
1908 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1909 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1910
1911 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1912
1913
1914grace <time>
1915 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1916 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001917 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001918 Arguments :
1919 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1920 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1921 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1922
1923 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1924 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001925 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001926 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1927
1928 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1929 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1930 simplify it.
1931
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001932
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001933hash-type <method>
1934 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1935 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1936 yes | no | yes | yes
1937 Arguments :
1938 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1939 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1940 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1941 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1942 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1943 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1944 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1945 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1946 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1947
1948 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1949 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1950 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1951 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1952 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1953 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1954 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1955 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1956 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1957 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1958 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1959 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1960 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1961
1962 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1963
1964 See also : "balance", "server"
1965
1966
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001967http-check disable-on-404
1968 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1969 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001970 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001971 Arguments : none
1972
1973 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1974 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1975 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1976 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1977 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
1978 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
1979 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
1980 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
1981 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
1982
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001983 See also : "option httpchk"
1984
1985
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01001986http-check send-state
1987 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
1988 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1989 yes | no | yes | yes
1990 Arguments : none
1991
1992 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
1993 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
1994 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
1995 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
1996 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
1997
1998 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
1999 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
2000 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
2001 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
2002 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
2003 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
2004 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
2005 checked in multiple backends.
2006
2007 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
2008 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
2009
2010 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
2011 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
2012 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
2013 one fails.
2014
2015 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
2016 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
2017 connections on all servers of the same backend.
2018
2019 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
2020 server's queue.
2021
2022 Example of a header received by the application server :
2023 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
2024 scur=13/22; qcur=0
2025
2026 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
2027
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002028http-request { allow | deny | http-auth [realm <realm>] }
2029 [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002030 Access control for Layer 7 requests
2031
2032 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2033 no | yes | yes | yes
2034
2035 These set of options allow to fine control access to a
2036 frontend/listen/backend. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
2037 First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
2038 For "block" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
2039 performed, for "http-auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
2040 should be asked to enter a username and password.
2041
2042 There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
2043 instance.
2044
2045 Example:
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002046 acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
2047 acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
2048 acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002049
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002050 http-request allow if nagios
2051 http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
2052 http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
2053 http-request deny
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002054
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002055 Example:
2056 acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002057
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01002058 http-request auth unless auth_ok
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002059
2060 See section 3.4 about userlists and 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002061
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002062id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02002063 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
2064 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2065 no | yes | yes | yes
2066 Arguments : none
2067
2068 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
2069 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
2070 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002071
2072
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002073log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002074log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002075 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2076 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2077 yes | yes | yes | yes
2078 Arguments :
2079 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2080 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2081 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2082 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2083 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2084 parameter.
2085
2086 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2087 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2088
2089 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2090 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2091 standard syslog port).
2092
2093 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2094 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2095 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2096 appropriately writeable).
2097
2098 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2099
2100 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2101 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2102 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2103
2104 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2105 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2106 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002107 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2108 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2109 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2110 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2111 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002112
2113 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2114
2115 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2116 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2117 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2118
2119 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002120 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2121 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2122 "info".
2123
2124 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2125 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2126 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2127 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2128
2129 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2130 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002131
2132 Example :
2133 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002134 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2135 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002136
2137
2138maxconn <conns>
2139 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2140 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2141 yes | yes | yes | no
2142 Arguments :
2143 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2144 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2145 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2146 closes.
2147
2148 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2149 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2150 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2151 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2152 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2153 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2154 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2155 properly tuned.
2156
2157 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2158 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2159 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2160
2161 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2162
2163
2164mode { tcp|http|health }
2165 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2166 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2167 yes | yes | yes | yes
2168 Arguments :
2169 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2170 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2171 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2172 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2173
2174 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2175 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2176 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2177 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2178 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2179
2180 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2181 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2182 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2183 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2184 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2185 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2186
2187 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2188 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2189 will be refused.
2190
2191 Example :
2192 defaults http_instances
2193 mode http
2194
2195 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2196
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002197
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002198monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002199 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002200 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2201 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002202 Arguments :
2203 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2204 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002205 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002206 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2207 backend and its backup.
2208
2209 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2210 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2211 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2212 servers in a list of backends.
2213
2214 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2215 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2216 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2217 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2218 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2219 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2220 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002221 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002222
2223 Example:
2224 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002225 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002226 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2227 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2228 monitor-uri /site_alive
2229 monitor fail if site_dead
2230
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002231 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2232
2233
2234monitor-net <source>
2235 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2236 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2237 yes | yes | yes | no
2238 Arguments :
2239 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2240 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2241 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2242 followed by a mask.
2243
2244 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2245 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002246 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002247 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2248
2249 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2250 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2251 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2252 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2253 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2254
2255 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2256 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2257 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2258 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2259 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2260
Willy Tarreau95cd2832010-03-04 23:36:33 +01002261 Last, please note that only one "monitor-net" statement can be specified in
2262 a frontend. If more than one is found, only the last one will be considered.
2263
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002264 Example :
2265 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2266 frontend www
2267 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2268
2269 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2270
2271
2272monitor-uri <uri>
2273 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2274 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2275 yes | yes | yes | no
2276 Arguments :
2277 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2278 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2279
2280 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2281 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2282 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2283 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2284 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2285 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2286 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2287 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2288
2289 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2290 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2291 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2292 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2293 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2294 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2295
2296 Example :
2297 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2298 frontend www
2299 mode http
2300 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2301
2302 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2303
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002304
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002305option abortonclose
2306no option abortonclose
2307 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2308 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2309 yes | no | yes | yes
2310 Arguments : none
2311
2312 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2313 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2314 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2315 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002316 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002317 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2318 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2319 encountered while delivering the response.
2320
2321 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2322 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2323 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2324 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2325 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2326 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002327 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002328 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002329 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002330 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2331 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2332 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2333
2334 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2335 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2336 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2337 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2338 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2339 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2340 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2341 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002342 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002343
2344 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2345 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2346
2347 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2348
2349
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002350option accept-invalid-http-request
2351no option accept-invalid-http-request
2352 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2353 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2354 yes | yes | yes | no
2355 Arguments : none
2356
2357 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2358 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2359 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2360 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2361 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2362 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2363 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2364 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2365 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2366
2367 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2368 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2369 been confirmed.
2370
2371 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2372 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2373 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2374 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2375
2376 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2377 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2378
2379 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2380 stats socket.
2381
2382
2383option accept-invalid-http-response
2384no option accept-invalid-http-response
2385 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2386 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2387 yes | no | yes | yes
2388 Arguments : none
2389
2390 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2391 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2392 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2393 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2394 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2395 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2396 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2397 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2398 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2399
2400 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2401 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2402 been confirmed.
2403
2404 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2405 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2406 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2407 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2408
2409 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2410 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2411
2412 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2413 stats socket.
2414
2415
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002416option allbackups
2417no option allbackups
2418 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2419 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2420 yes | no | yes | yes
2421 Arguments : none
2422
2423 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2424 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2425 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2426 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2427 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2428 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2429 order between the backup servers anymore.
2430
2431 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2432 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2433
2434 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2435 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2436
2437
2438option checkcache
2439no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002440 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002441 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2442 yes | no | yes | yes
2443 Arguments : none
2444
2445 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2446 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002447 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002448 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2449 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2450 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2451
2452 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002453 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002454 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002455 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2456 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002457 to the client are :
2458 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002459 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002460 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002461 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2462 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2463 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2464 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2465 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2466 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2467 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2468 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2469 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2470 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2471 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2472
2473 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002474 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002475 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002476 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002477 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2478
2479 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2480 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002481 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002482 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2483
2484 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2485 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2486
2487
2488option clitcpka
2489no option clitcpka
2490 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2491 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2492 yes | yes | yes | no
2493 Arguments : none
2494
2495 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2496 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2497 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2498 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2499
2500 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2501 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2502 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2503 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2504
2505 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2506 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2507 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2508 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2509 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2510
2511 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2512
2513 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2514 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2515 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2516
2517 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2518 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2519
2520 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2521
2522
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002523option contstats
2524 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2525 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2526 yes | yes | yes | no
2527 Arguments : none
2528
2529 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2530 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2531 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2532 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2533 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2534 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2535 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2536
2537
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002538option dontlog-normal
2539no option dontlog-normal
2540 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2541 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2542 yes | yes | yes | no
2543 Arguments : none
2544
2545 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2546 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2547 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2548 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2549 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2550 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2551 logged.
2552
2553 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2554 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2555 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2556
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002557 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002558 logging.
2559
2560
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002561option dontlognull
2562no option dontlognull
2563 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2564 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2565 yes | yes | yes | no
2566 Arguments : none
2567
2568 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2569 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2570 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2571 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2572 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2573 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2574 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2575
2576 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2577 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2578 would not be logged.
2579
2580 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2581 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2582
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002583 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002584
2585
2586option forceclose
2587no option forceclose
2588 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2589 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002590 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002591 Arguments : none
2592
2593 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2594 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2595 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2596 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2597 global session times in the logs.
2598
2599 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002600 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002601 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2602 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2603 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2604 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002605
2606 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2607 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2608
2609 See also : "option httpclose"
2610
2611
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002612option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002613 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2614 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2615 yes | yes | yes | yes
2616 Arguments :
2617 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2618 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002619 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002620 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002621
2622 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2623 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2624 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2625 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2626 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2627 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2628 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002629 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2630 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2631 possible that the client has already brought one.
2632
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002633 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002634 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002635 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2636 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002637 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2638 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002639
2640 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2641 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2642 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2643 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2644 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2645 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2646 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2647
2648 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002649 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2650 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2651 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002652
2653 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2654 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2655 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2656 when using this option.
2657
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002658 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002659 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2660 frontend www
2661 mode http
2662 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2663
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002664 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2665 backend www
2666 mode http
2667 option forwardfor header X-Client
2668
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002669 See also : "option httpclose"
2670
2671
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002672option http-server-close
2673no option http-server-close
2674 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2675 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2676 yes | yes | yes | yes
2677 Arguments : none
2678
2679 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2680 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2681 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2682 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2683 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2684 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
2685 of RFC2616.
2686
2687 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2688 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2689 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2690 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002691 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2692 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002693
2694 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2695 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002696 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2697 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2698 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002699
2700 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2701 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2702
2703 See also : "option forceclose" and "option httpclose"
2704
2705
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002706option http-use-proxy-header
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002707no option http-use-proxy-header
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002708 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2709 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2710 yes | yes | yes | no
2711 Arguments : none
2712
2713 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2714 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2715 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2716 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2717 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2718 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2719 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2720
2721 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2722 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2723 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2724 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2725 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2726 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2727 request along its whole life.
2728
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002729 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2730 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2731 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2732 front of an existing proxy.
2733
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002734 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2735
2736 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2737 http-server-close".
2738
2739
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01002740option httpchk
2741option httpchk <uri>
2742option httpchk <method> <uri>
2743option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2744 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2745 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2746 yes | no | yes | yes
2747 Arguments :
2748 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2749 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2750 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2751 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2752 ones.
2753
2754 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2755 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2756 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2757
2758 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2759 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2760 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2761 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2762 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2763
2764 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2765 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2766 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2767 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2768 the lack of any response.
2769
2770 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2771
2772 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2773 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2774 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2775
2776 Examples :
2777 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2778 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2779 backend https_relay
2780 mode tcp
2781 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
2782 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2783
2784 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
2785 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.
2786
2787
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002788option httpclose
2789no option httpclose
2790 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2791 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2792 yes | yes | yes | yes
2793 Arguments : none
2794
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002795 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yes support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002796 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2797 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2798 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2799 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2800 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2801 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2802 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2803 be removed.
2804
2805 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002806 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2807 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2808 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2809 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2810 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2811 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002812
2813 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2814 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2815 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002816 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2817 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002818
2819 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2820 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2821
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002822 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002823
2824
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002825option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002826 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2827 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2828 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002829 Arguments :
2830 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2831 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2832 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2833 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2834 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002835
2836 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2837 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2838 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2839 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2840 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2841 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2842 ports.
2843
2844 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2845
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002846 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2847 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2848 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2849 by default.
2850
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002851 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002852
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002853
2854option http_proxy
2855no option http_proxy
2856 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2857 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2858 yes | yes | yes | yes
2859 Arguments : none
2860
2861 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2862 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2863 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2864 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2865 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2866
2867 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2868 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2869 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2870 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2871 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2872 be analyzed.
2873
2874 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2875 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2876
2877 Example :
2878 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2879 backend direct_forward
2880 option httpclose
2881 option http_proxy
2882
2883 See also : "option httpclose"
2884
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002885
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02002886option independant-streams
2887no option independant-streams
2888 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
2889 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2890 yes | yes | yes | yes
2891 Arguments : none
2892
2893 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
2894 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
2895 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
2896 receive data or not.
2897
2898 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
2899 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
2900 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
2901 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
2902 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
2903 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
2904 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
2905 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
2906 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
2907 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
2908 socket buffers.
2909
2910 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
2911 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
2912 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
2913 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
2914 slow lines, so use it with caution.
2915
2916 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
2917
2918
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002919option log-health-checks
2920no option log-health-checks
2921 Enable or disable logging of health checks
2922 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2923 yes | no | yes | yes
2924 Arguments : none
2925
2926 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
2927 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
2928 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
2929 of additional information is limited.
2930
2931 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
2932 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
2933
2934 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
2935
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002936
2937option log-separate-errors
2938no option log-separate-errors
2939 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
2940 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2941 yes | yes | yes | no
2942 Arguments : none
2943
2944 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
2945 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
2946 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
2947 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
2948 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
2949 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
2950 provides very important information.
2951
2952 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
2953 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
2954 error logs.
2955
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002956 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002957 logging.
2958
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002959
2960option logasap
2961no option logasap
2962 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
2963 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2964 yes | yes | yes | no
2965 Arguments : none
2966
2967 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
2968 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
2969 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
2970 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
2971 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
2972 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
2973 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002974 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002975 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
2976 bytes are expected to be transferred.
2977
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002978 Examples :
2979 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
2980 mode http
2981 option httplog
2982 option logasap
2983 log 192.168.2.200 local3
2984
2985 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
2986 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
2987 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
2988 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
2989
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002990 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002991 logging.
2992
2993
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01002994option mysql-check
2995 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
2996 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2997 yes | no | yes | yes
2998 Arguments : none
2999
3000 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
3001 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
3002 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
3003 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
3004 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
3005
3006 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
3007 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
3008 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3009 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3010 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
3011 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
3012
3013 See also: "option httpchk"
3014
3015
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003016option nolinger
3017no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003018 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003019 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3020 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003021 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003022
3023 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
3024 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
3025 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
3026 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
3027 connections.
3028
3029 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
3030 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
3031 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
3032 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
3033 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
3034 this too.
3035
3036 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
3037 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
3038 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
3039
3040 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
3041 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
3042 for servers.
3043
3044 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3045 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3046
3047
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02003048option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
3049 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
3050 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3051 yes | yes | yes | yes
3052 Arguments :
3053 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
3054 matching <network>
3055 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
3056 header name.
3057
3058 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
3059 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
3060 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
3061 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
3062 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
3063 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
3064 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
3065 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
3066 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
3067 possible that the client has already brought one.
3068
3069 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
3070 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
3071 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
3072 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
3073 header and requires different one.
3074
3075 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
3076 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
3077 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
3078 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3079 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3080 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3081 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3082
3083 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3084 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3085 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3086 both are defined.
3087
3088 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3089 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3090 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3091 when using this option.
3092
3093 Examples :
3094 # Original Destination address
3095 frontend www
3096 mode http
3097 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3098
3099 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3100 backend www
3101 mode http
3102 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3103
3104 See also : "option httpclose"
3105
3106
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003107option persist
3108no option persist
3109 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3110 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3111 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003112 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003113
3114 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3115 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3116 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3117 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3118 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3119 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3120 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3121 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3122 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3123 redirected to another valid server.
3124
3125 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3126 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3127
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003128 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003129
3130
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003131option redispatch
3132no option redispatch
3133 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3134 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3135 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003136 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003137
3138 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3139 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3140 be able to access the service anymore.
3141
3142 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3143 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3144
3145 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3146 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3147 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003148
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003149 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3150 "redisp" keywords.
3151
3152 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3153 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3154
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003155 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003156
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003157
3158option smtpchk
3159option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3160 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3161 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3162 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003163 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003164 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3165 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3166 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3167
3168 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3169 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3170 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3171
3172 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3173 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3174 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3175 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3176 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3177 dead server.
3178
3179 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3180 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3181 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3182 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3183
3184 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3185 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3186 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3187 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3188 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3189
3190 Example :
3191 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3192
3193 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3194
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003195
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003196option socket-stats
3197no option socket-stats
3198
3199 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3200 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3201 yes | yes | yes | no
3202
3203 Arguments : none
3204
3205
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003206option splice-auto
3207no option splice-auto
3208 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3209 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3210 yes | yes | yes | yes
3211 Arguments : none
3212
3213 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3214 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3215 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3216 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003217 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003218 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3219 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3220 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3221 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3222
3223 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3224 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3225 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3226 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3227 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3228 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3229 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3230 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3231 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3232 keyword.
3233
3234 Example :
3235 option splice-auto
3236
3237 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3238 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3239
3240 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3241 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3242
3243
3244option splice-request
3245no option splice-request
3246 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3247 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3248 yes | yes | yes | yes
3249 Arguments : none
3250
3251 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3252 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3253 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3254 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3255 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3256 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3257
3258 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3259
3260 Example :
3261 option splice-request
3262
3263 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3264 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3265
3266 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3267 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3268
3269
3270option splice-response
3271no option splice-response
3272 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3273 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3274 yes | yes | yes | yes
3275 Arguments : none
3276
3277 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3278 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3279 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3280 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3281 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3282 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3283
3284 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3285
3286 Example :
3287 option splice-response
3288
3289 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3290 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3291
3292 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3293 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3294
3295
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003296option srvtcpka
3297no option srvtcpka
3298 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3299 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3300 yes | no | yes | yes
3301 Arguments : none
3302
3303 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3304 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3305 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3306 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3307
3308 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3309 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3310 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3311 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3312
3313 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3314 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3315 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3316 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3317 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3318
3319 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3320
3321 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3322 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3323 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3324
3325 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3326 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3327
3328 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3329
3330
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003331option ssl-hello-chk
3332 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3333 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3334 yes | no | yes | yes
3335 Arguments : none
3336
3337 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3338 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3339 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3340 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3341 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3342 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3343 hello message.
3344
3345 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3346 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3347 messages, which is appreciable.
3348
3349 See also: "option httpchk"
3350
3351
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003352option tcp-smart-accept
3353no option tcp-smart-accept
3354 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3355 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3356 yes | yes | yes | no
3357 Arguments : none
3358
3359 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3360 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3361 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3362 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3363 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3364 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3365
3366 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3367 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3368 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3369 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3370
3371 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3372 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3373 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3374 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3375
3376 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3377 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3378 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3379
3380 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3381 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3382 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3383
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003384 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3385
3386
3387option tcp-smart-connect
3388no option tcp-smart-connect
3389 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3390 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3391 yes | no | yes | yes
3392 Arguments : none
3393
3394 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3395 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3396 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3397 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3398 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3399
3400 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3401 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3402 complex.
3403
3404 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3405 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3406 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3407
3408 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3409 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3410
3411 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3412
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003413
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003414option tcpka
3415 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3416 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3417 yes | yes | yes | yes
3418 Arguments : none
3419
3420 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3421 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3422 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3423 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3424
3425 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3426 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3427 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3428 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3429
3430 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3431 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3432 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3433 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3434 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3435
3436 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3437
3438 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3439 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3440 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3441 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3442 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3443 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3444 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3445 backends.
3446
3447 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3448
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003449
3450option tcplog
3451 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3452 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3453 yes | yes | yes | yes
3454 Arguments : none
3455
3456 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3457 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3458 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3459 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3460 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3461 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3462 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3463 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3464
3465 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3466
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003467 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003468
3469
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003470option transparent
3471no option transparent
3472 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3473 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003474 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003475 Arguments : none
3476
3477 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3478 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3479 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3480 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3481 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3482 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3483 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3484 appropriate server.
3485
3486 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3487 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3488
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003489 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3490 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003491
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003492
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003493persist rdp-cookie
3494persist rdp-cookie(name)
3495 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3496 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3497 yes | no | yes | yes
3498 Arguments :
3499 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
3500 default cookie name "mstshash" will be used. There currently is
3501 no valid reason to change this name.
3502
3503 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3504 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3505 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3506 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3507 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3508 forwarded to this server.
3509
3510 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3511 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3512 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003513 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003514 a single "listen" section.
3515
3516 Example :
3517 listen tse-farm
3518 bind :3389
3519 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3520 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3521 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3522 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3523 persist rdp-cookie
3524 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3525 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3526 balance rdp-cookie
3527 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3528 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3529
3530 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3531
3532
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003533rate-limit sessions <rate>
3534 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3535 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3536 yes | yes | yes | no
3537 Arguments :
3538 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3539 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3540
3541 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3542 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3543 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3544 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3545 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3546 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3547
3548 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3549 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3550 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3551 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3552
3553 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3554 listen smtp
3555 mode tcp
3556 bind :25
3557 rate-limit sessions 10
3558 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3559
3560 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3561 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3562
3563 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3564
3565
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003566redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3567redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003568 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3569 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3570 no | yes | yes | yes
3571
3572 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003573 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003574
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003575 Arguments :
3576 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3577 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3578 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3579 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003580 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3581 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3582 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3583 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003584
3585 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3586 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3587 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3588 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3589 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3590 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3591 location with a GET method.
3592
3593 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3594 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3595
3596 - "drop-query"
3597 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3598 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3599 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3600 with a location-type redirect.
3601
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003602 - "append-slash"
3603 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3604 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3605 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3606 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3607
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003608 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3609 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3610 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3611 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3612 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3613 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3614 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3615
3616 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3617 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3618 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3619 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3620 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3621 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3622 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003623
3624 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3625 acl clear dst_port 80
3626 acl secure dst_port 8080
3627 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003628 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003629 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003630 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3631
3632 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003633 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3634 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3635 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003636 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003637
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003638 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3639 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3640 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3641
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003642 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003643
3644
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003645redisp (deprecated)
3646redispatch (deprecated)
3647 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3648 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3649 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003650 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003651
3652 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3653 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3654 be able to access the service anymore.
3655
3656 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3657 redistribute them to a working server.
3658
3659 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3660 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3661 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003662
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003663 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3664 "option redispatch" instead.
3665
3666 See also : "option redispatch"
3667
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003668
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003669reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003670 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3671 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3672 no | yes | yes | yes
3673 Arguments :
3674 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3675 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003676 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003677
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003678 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3679 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3680
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003681 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3682 the last header of an HTTP request.
3683
3684 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3685 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3686 responses.
3687
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003688 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3689 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3690 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3691
3692 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3693 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003694
3695
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003696reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3697reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003698 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3699 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3700 no | yes | yes | yes
3701 Arguments :
3702 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3703 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3704 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3705 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3706 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3707 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3708 ignores case.
3709
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003710 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3711 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3712
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003713 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3714 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3715 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3716 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003717 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003718
3719 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3720 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3721
3722 Example :
3723 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3724 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3725 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3726
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003727 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3728 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003729
3730
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003731reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3732reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003733 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3734 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3735 no | yes | yes | yes
3736 Arguments :
3737 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3738 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3739 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3740 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3741 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3742 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3743
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003744 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3745 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3746
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003747 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3748 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3749 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3750 next servers.
3751
3752 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3753 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3754 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3755
3756 Example :
3757 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3758 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3759 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3760
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003761 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3762 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003763
3764
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003765reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3766reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003767 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3768 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3769 no | yes | yes | yes
3770 Arguments :
3771 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3772 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3773 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3774 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3775 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3776 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3777 case.
3778
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003779 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3780 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3781
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003782 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3783 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3784 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3785 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003786 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003787
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003788 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003789 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003790 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003791
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003792 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3793 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3794
3795 Example :
3796 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3797 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3798 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3799
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003800 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3801 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003802
3803
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003804reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3805reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003806 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3807 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3808 no | yes | yes | yes
3809 Arguments :
3810 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3811 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3812 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3813 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3814 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3815 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3816 case.
3817
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003818 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3819 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3820
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003821 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3822 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3823 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3824 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3825
3826 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3827 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3828
3829 Example :
3830 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3831 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3832 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3833 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3834
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003835 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3836 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003837
3838
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003839reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3840reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003841 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3842 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3843 no | yes | yes | yes
3844 Arguments :
3845 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3846 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3847 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3848 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3849 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3850 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3851
3852 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3853 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3854 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3855 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003856 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003857
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003858 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3859 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3860
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003861 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3862 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3863 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3864
3865 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3866 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3867 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3868 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3869 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3870
3871 Example :
3872 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3873 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3874 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3875 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
3876
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003877 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
3878 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003879
3880
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003881reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3882reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003883 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
3884 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3885 no | yes | yes | yes
3886 Arguments :
3887 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3888 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3889 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3890 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3891 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3892 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
3893 ignores case.
3894
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003895 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3896 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3897
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003898 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3899 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003900 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
3901 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
3902 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003903 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
3904 not set.
3905
3906 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
3907 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
3908 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
3909 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
3910 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
3911
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003912 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003913 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
3914 # block all others.
3915 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
3916 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
3917
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003918 # block bad guys
3919 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
3920 reqitarpit . if badguys
3921
3922 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
3923 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003924
3925
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02003926retries <value>
3927 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
3928 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3929 yes | no | yes | yes
3930 Arguments :
3931 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
3932 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
3933 default value is 3.
3934
3935 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
3936 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
3937 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
3938
3939 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
3940 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
3941
3942 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
3943 server even if a cookie references a different server.
3944
3945 See also : "option redispatch"
3946
3947
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003948rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003949 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
3950 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3951 no | yes | yes | yes
3952 Arguments :
3953 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3954 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003955 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003956
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003957 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3958 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3959
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003960 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3961 the last header of an HTTP response.
3962
3963 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3964 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3965 responses.
3966
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003967 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3968 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003969
3970
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003971rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3972rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003973 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
3974 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3975 no | yes | yes | yes
3976 Arguments :
3977 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3978 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3979 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3980 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3981 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3982 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
3983 ignores case.
3984
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003985 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3986 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3987
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003988 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
3989 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3990 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
3991 client.
3992
3993 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3994 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3995 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3996
3997 Example :
3998 # remove the Server header from responses
3999 reqidel ^Server:.*
4000
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004001 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
4002 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004003
4004
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004005rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4006rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004007 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
4008 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4009 no | yes | yes | yes
4010 Arguments :
4011 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4012 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4013 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4014 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4015 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4016 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
4017 ignores case.
4018
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004019 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4020 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4021
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004022 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4023 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
4024 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
4025 case-sensitive.
4026
4027 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004028 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
4029 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
4030 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004031
4032 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
4033 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
4034
4035 Example :
4036 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
4037 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
4038
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004039 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
4040 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004041
4042
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004043rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4044rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004045 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
4046 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4047 no | yes | yes | yes
4048 Arguments :
4049 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4050 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4051 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4052 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4053 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4054 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
4055 ignores case.
4056
4057 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4058 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4059 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4060 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004061 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004062
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004063 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4064 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4065
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004066 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
4067 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
4068 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
4069
4070 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4071 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4072 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4073 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
4074 are not case-sensitive.
4075
4076 Example :
4077 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
4078 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4079
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004080 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4081 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004082
4083
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004084server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4085 Declare a server in a backend
4086 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4087 no | no | yes | yes
4088 Arguments :
4089 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4090 appear in logs and alerts.
4091
4092 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4093 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4094 start-up.
4095
4096 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4097 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4098 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4099 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4100 adding this value to the client's port.
4101
4102 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4103 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004104 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004105
4106 Examples :
4107 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4108 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4109
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004110 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004111
4112
4113source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004114source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004115 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4116 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4117 yes | no | yes | yes
4118 Arguments :
4119 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4120 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4121 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4122 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4123
4124 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4125 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004126 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4127 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4128 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004129
4130 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4131 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4132 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4133 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4134 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4135 <addr>.
4136
4137 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4138 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4139 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4140 port.
4141
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004142 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4143 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4144 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4145 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4146 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4147 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4148
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004149 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4150 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4151 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4152 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4153
4154 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4155 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4156 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4157 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4158 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4159 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4160
4161 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4162 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4163 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4164 there are two methods :
4165
4166 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4167 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4168 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4169 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4170 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4171 of the client ranges may be used.
4172
4173 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4174 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4175 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4176 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4177 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4178 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4179 same session.
4180
4181 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4182 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4183 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4184 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4185 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4186 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4187
4188 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4189 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4190 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004191 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004192
4193 Examples :
4194 backend private
4195 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4196 source 192.168.1.200
4197
4198 backend transparent_ssl1
4199 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4200 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4201
4202 backend transparent_ssl2
4203 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4204 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4205 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4206
4207 backend transparent_ssl3
4208 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4209 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4210 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4211
4212 backend transparent_smtp
4213 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4214 # with Tproxy version 4.
4215 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4216
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004217 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004218 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4219
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004220
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004221srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4222 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4223 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4224 yes | no | yes | yes
4225 Arguments :
4226 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4227 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4228 as explained at the top of this document.
4229
4230 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4231 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4232 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4233 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4234 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4235 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4236 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4237
4238 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4239 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4240 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4241 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4242 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004243 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004244 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004245 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004246
4247 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4248 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4249 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4250 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4251 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4252 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4253
4254 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4255 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4256
4257 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4258
4259
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004260stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4261 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4262 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4263 yes | no | yes | yes
4264 Arguments :
4265 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4266
4267 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4268
4269 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4270 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4271 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4272 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4273 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4274 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4275
4276 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4277 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4278 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4279 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4280
4281 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4282 report using "stats scope".
4283
4284 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4285 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4286 unobvious parameters.
4287
4288 Example :
4289 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4290 backend public_www
4291 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4292 stats enable
4293 stats hide-version
4294 stats scope .
4295 stats uri /admin?stats
4296 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4297 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4298 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4299
4300 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4301 backend private_monitoring
4302 stats enable
4303 stats uri /admin?stats
4304 stats refresh 5s
4305
4306 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4307
4308
4309stats enable
4310 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4311 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4312 yes | no | yes | yes
4313 Arguments : none
4314
4315 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4316 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4317 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4318 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4319 - stats auth : no authentication
4320 - stats scope : no restriction
4321
4322 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4323 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4324 unobvious parameters.
4325
4326 Example :
4327 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4328 backend public_www
4329 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4330 stats enable
4331 stats hide-version
4332 stats scope .
4333 stats uri /admin?stats
4334 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4335 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4336 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4337
4338 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4339 backend private_monitoring
4340 stats enable
4341 stats uri /admin?stats
4342 stats refresh 5s
4343
4344 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4345
4346
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004347stats hide-version
4348 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004349 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4350 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004351 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004352
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004353 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4354 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4355 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4356 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4357 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4358 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004359
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004360 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4361 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4362 unobvious parameters.
4363
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004364 Example :
4365 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4366 backend public_www
4367 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004368 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004369 stats hide-version
4370 stats scope .
4371 stats uri /admin?stats
4372 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4373 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4374 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004375
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004376 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4377 backend private_monitoring
4378 stats enable
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004379 stats uri /admin?stats
4380 stats refresh 5s
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004381
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004382 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004383
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004384
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004385stats realm <realm>
4386 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4387 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4388 yes | no | yes | yes
4389 Arguments :
4390 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4391 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4392 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4393
4394 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4395 using a backslash ('\').
4396
4397 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4398 only related to authentication.
4399
4400 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4401 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4402 unobvious parameters.
4403
4404 Example :
4405 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4406 backend public_www
4407 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4408 stats enable
4409 stats hide-version
4410 stats scope .
4411 stats uri /admin?stats
4412 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4413 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4414 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4415
4416 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4417 backend private_monitoring
4418 stats enable
4419 stats uri /admin?stats
4420 stats refresh 5s
4421
4422 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4423
4424
4425stats refresh <delay>
4426 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4427 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4428 yes | no | yes | yes
4429 Arguments :
4430 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4431 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4432 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4433 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4434 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4435 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4436
4437 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4438 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4439 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4440 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4441
4442 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4443 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4444 unobvious parameters.
4445
4446 Example :
4447 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4448 backend public_www
4449 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4450 stats enable
4451 stats hide-version
4452 stats scope .
4453 stats uri /admin?stats
4454 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4455 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4456 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4457
4458 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4459 backend private_monitoring
4460 stats enable
4461 stats uri /admin?stats
4462 stats refresh 5s
4463
4464 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4465
4466
4467stats scope { <name> | "." }
4468 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4469 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4470 yes | no | yes | yes
4471 Arguments :
4472 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4473 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4474 section in which the statement appears.
4475
4476 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4477 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4478 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4479 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4480 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4481 exists.
4482
4483 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4484 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4485 unobvious parameters.
4486
4487 Example :
4488 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4489 backend public_www
4490 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4491 stats enable
4492 stats hide-version
4493 stats scope .
4494 stats uri /admin?stats
4495 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4496 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4497 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4498
4499 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4500 backend private_monitoring
4501 stats enable
4502 stats uri /admin?stats
4503 stats refresh 5s
4504
4505 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4506
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004507
4508stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4509 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4510 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4511 yes | no | yes | yes
4512
4513 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4514 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4515
4516 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4517 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
4518
4519 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4520 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4521 unobvious parameters.
4522
4523 Example :
4524 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4525 backend private_monitoring
4526 stats enable
4527 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
4528 stats uri /admin?stats
4529 stats refresh 5s
4530
4531 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4532 global section.
4533
4534
4535stats show-legends
4536 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4537 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4538 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4539 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4540 - IP (socket, server)
4541 - cookie (backend, server)
4542
4543 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4544 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4545 unobvious parameters.
4546
4547 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
4548
4549
4550stats show-node [ <name> ]
4551 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4552 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4553 yes | no | yes | yes
4554 Arguments:
4555 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4556 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
4557
4558 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4559 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4560 provided for each customer.
4561
4562 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4563 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4564 unobvious parameters.
4565
4566 Example:
4567 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4568 backend private_monitoring
4569 stats enable
4570 stats show-node Europe-1
4571 stats uri /admin?stats
4572 stats refresh 5s
4573
4574 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4575 section.
4576
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004577
4578stats uri <prefix>
4579 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4580 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4581 yes | no | yes | yes
4582 Arguments :
4583 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4584 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4585 query string.
4586
4587 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4588 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4589 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4590 possible to reach it in the application.
4591
4592 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004593 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004594 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4595 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4596 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4597 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4598
4599 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4600 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4601 an address or a port to statistics only.
4602
4603 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4604 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4605 unobvious parameters.
4606
4607 Example :
4608 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4609 backend public_www
4610 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4611 stats enable
4612 stats hide-version
4613 stats scope .
4614 stats uri /admin?stats
4615 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4616 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4617 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4618
4619 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4620 backend private_monitoring
4621 stats enable
4622 stats uri /admin?stats
4623 stats refresh 5s
4624
4625 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4626
4627
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004628stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4629 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004630 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01004631 no | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004632
4633 Arguments :
4634 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4635 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4636 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4637 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4638
4639 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4640 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4641 the "stick-table" statement.
4642
4643 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4644 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4645 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4646 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4647 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4648
4649 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4650 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4651 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4652 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4653 transformation rules.
4654
4655 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4656 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4657 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4658 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4659 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4660 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4661 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4662
4663 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4664 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4665 ACL based conditions.
4666
4667 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4668 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4669 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4670 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4671
4672 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4673 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4674 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4675 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4676
4677 Example :
4678 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4679 # last 30 minutes
4680 backend pop
4681 mode tcp
4682 balance roundrobin
4683 stick store-request src
4684 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4685 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4686 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4687
4688 backend smtp
4689 mode tcp
4690 balance roundrobin
4691 stick match src table pop
4692 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4693 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4694
4695 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4696 extraction.
4697
4698
4699stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4700 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4701 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4702 no | no | yes | yes
4703
4704 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4705 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4706 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4707 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4708
4709 Examples :
4710 # The following form ...
Willy Tarreauec579d82010-02-26 19:15:04 +01004711 stick on src table pop if !localhost
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004712
4713 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4714 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4715 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4716
4717
4718 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4719 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4720 backend http
4721 mode http
4722 balance roundrobin
4723 stick on src table https
4724 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4725 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4726 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4727
4728 backend https
4729 mode tcp
4730 balance roundrobin
4731 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4732 stick on src
4733 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4734 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4735
4736 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4737
4738
4739stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4740 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4741 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4742 no | no | yes | yes
4743
4744 Arguments :
4745 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4746 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4747 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4748 server is selected.
4749
4750 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4751 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4752 the "stick-table" statement.
4753
4754 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4755 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4756 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4757 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4758 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4759 address.
4760
4761 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4762 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4763 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4764 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4765 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4766 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4767 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4768 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4769 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4770 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4771
4772 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4773 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4774 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4775 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4776 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4777 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4778 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4779
4780 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4781 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4782 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4783 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4784
4785 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4786 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4787 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4788 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4789 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4790 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4791 another protocol or access method.
4792
4793 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4794 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4795 the request.
4796
4797 Example :
4798 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4799 # last 30 minutes
4800 backend pop
4801 mode tcp
4802 balance roundrobin
4803 stick store-request src
4804 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4805 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4806 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4807
4808 backend smtp
4809 mode tcp
4810 balance roundrobin
4811 stick match src table pop
4812 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4813 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4814
4815 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4816 extraction.
4817
4818
4819stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4820 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4821 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4822 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4823 no | no | yes | yes
4824
4825 Arguments :
4826 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
4827 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
4828 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
4829 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
4830
4831 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
4832 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
4833 instance.
4834
4835 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
4836 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
4837 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
4838 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
4839 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
4840 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
4841 to 31 characters.
4842
4843 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
4844 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
4845 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
4846 increase.
4847
4848 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01004849 value directly impacts memory usage. Count approximately
4850 50 bytes per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size
4851 supports suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004852
4853 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
4854 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
4855 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
4856 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
4857 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
4858 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
4859 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
4860 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
4861 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
4862 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
4863 parameter (see below).
4864
4865 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
4866 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
4867 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
4868 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
4869 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
4870 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
4871 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
4872 if not expiration delay is specified.
4873
4874 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
4875 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
4876 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
4877 reference it.
4878
4879 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
4880 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
4881 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
4882 as an exclusive stickiness.
4883
4884 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
4885 about time format.
4886
4887
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004888tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
4889 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4890 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4891 no | yes | yes | no
4892
4893 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
4894 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4895 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4896 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4897 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4898 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4899 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4900 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4901
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004902 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004903 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4904
4905 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
4906 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
4907 "reject" statement.
4908
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004909 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004910
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004911 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004912
4913
4914tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
4915 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4916 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4917 no | yes | yes | no
4918
4919 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
4920 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4921 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4922 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4923 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4924 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4925 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4926 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4927
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004928 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004929 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4930
4931 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
4932 "accept".
4933
4934 Example:
4935 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
4936 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4937 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4938 tcp-request reject if content_present
4939
4940 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
4941 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4942 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4943 tcp-request accept if content_present
4944 tcp-request reject
4945
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004946 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004947
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004948 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004949
4950
4951tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
4952 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
4953 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4954 no | yes | yes | no
4955 Arguments :
4956 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4957 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4958 as explained at the top of this document.
4959
4960 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
4961 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
4962 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
4963 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
4964 data for at most the specified amount of time.
4965
4966 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
4967 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004968 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004969 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01004970 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
4971 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
4972 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
4973 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004974
4975 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
4976 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
4977 it pass through unaffected.
4978
4979 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
4980 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
4981 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004982 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004983 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
4984 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
4985 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
4986
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004987 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004988 "timeout client".
4989
4990
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004991timeout check <timeout>
4992 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
4993 established.
4994
4995 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4996 yes | no | yes | yes
4997 Arguments:
4998 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4999 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5000 as explained at the top of this document.
5001
5002 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
5003 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
5004 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
5005 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
Willy Tarreaud7550a22010-02-10 05:10:19 +01005006 (Please also note that there is no valid reason to have such long connect
5007 timeouts, because "timeout queue" and "timeout tarpit" can always be used to
5008 avoid that).
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005009
5010 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
5011 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
5012
5013 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
5014 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005015 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005016
5017 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5018 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5019 forget about it.
5020
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005021 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
5022 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005023
5024
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005025timeout client <timeout>
5026timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5027 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
5028 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5029 yes | yes | yes | no
5030 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005031 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005032 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5033 as explained at the top of this document.
5034
5035 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
5036 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5037 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
5038 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
5039 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
5040 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
5041 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
5042 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005043 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005044 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
5045 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
5046
5047 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
5048 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5049 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5050 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5051 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5052 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5053
5054 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
5055 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
5056 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5057
5058 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
5059
5060
5061timeout connect <timeout>
5062timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5063 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
5064 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5065 yes | no | yes | yes
5066 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005067 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005068 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5069 as explained at the top of this document.
5070
5071 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005072 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005073 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005074 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005075 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
5076 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005077
5078 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5079 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5080 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5081 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5082 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5083 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5084
5085 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5086 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5087 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5088
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005089 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5090 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005091
5092
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005093timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5094 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5095 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5096 yes | yes | yes | yes
5097 Arguments :
5098 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5099 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5100 as explained at the top of this document.
5101
5102 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5103 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5104 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5105 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5106 once the request has started to present itself.
5107
5108 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5109 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5110 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5111 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5112 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5113
5114 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5115 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5116 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5117 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5118
5119 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5120 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5121 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5122 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5123 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
5124 with tends to hundreds of thousands of clients.
5125
5126 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5127 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5128 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5129 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5130
5131 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5132
5133
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005134timeout http-request <timeout>
5135 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5136 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005137 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005138 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005139 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005140 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5141 as explained at the top of this document.
5142
5143 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5144 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5145 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5146 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5147 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5148 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5149 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5150 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5151
5152 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5153 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005154 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5155 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005156
5157 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5158 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5159 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5160 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5161 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5162
5163 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005164 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5165 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5166 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005167
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005168 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005169
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005170
5171timeout queue <timeout>
5172 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5173 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5174 yes | no | yes | yes
5175 Arguments :
5176 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5177 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5178 as explained at the top of this document.
5179
5180 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5181 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5182 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5183 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5184 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5185
5186 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5187 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5188 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5189 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5190
5191 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5192
5193
5194timeout server <timeout>
5195timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5196 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5197 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5198 yes | no | yes | yes
5199 Arguments :
5200 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5201 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5202 as explained at the top of this document.
5203
5204 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5205 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5206 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5207 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5208 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5209 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5210 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5211
5212 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5213 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5214 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5215 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5216 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005217 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005218 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005219 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005220
5221 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5222 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5223 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5224 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5225 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5226 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5227
5228 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5229 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5230 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5231
5232 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5233
5234
5235timeout tarpit <timeout>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005236 Set the duration for which tarpitted connections will be maintained
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005237 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5238 yes | yes | yes | yes
5239 Arguments :
5240 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5241 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5242 as explained at the top of this document.
5243
5244 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5245 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5246 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5247
5248 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5249 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5250 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5251 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005252 with no "timeout tarpit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005253
5254 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5255
5256
5257transparent (deprecated)
5258 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5259 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005260 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005261 Arguments : none
5262
5263 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5264 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5265 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5266 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5267 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5268 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5269 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5270 appropriate server.
5271
5272 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5273
5274 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5275 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5276
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005277 See also: "option transparent"
5278
5279
5280use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5281use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005282 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005283 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5284 no | yes | yes | no
5285 Arguments :
5286 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5287
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005288 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005289
5290 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5291 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5292 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005293 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5294 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5295 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5296 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005297
5298 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5299 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5300 assign the backend.
5301
5302 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5303 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5304 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5305 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5306 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5307 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5308
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005309 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005310 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005311 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5312 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5313 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5314
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005315 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005316
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005317
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010053185. Server and default-server options
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01005319------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005320
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005321The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5322which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5323arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5324settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5325after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5326Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5327address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005328
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005329 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005330 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005331
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005332The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005333
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005334addr <ipv4>
5335 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5336 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5337 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5338 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5339 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005340
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005341 Supported in default-server: No
5342
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005343backup
5344 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5345 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5346 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5347 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5348 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5349 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005351 Supported in default-server: No
5352
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005353check
5354 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5355 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5356 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5357 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5358 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5359 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5360 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5361 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5362 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005363 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5364 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005365
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005366 Supported in default-server: No
5367
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005368cookie <value>
5369 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5370 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5371 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5372 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5373 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5374 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5375 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5376
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005377 Supported in default-server: No
5378
5379error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005380 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5381 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5382 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005383
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005384 Supported in default-server: Yes
5385
5386 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005387
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005388fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005389 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5390 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5391 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5392
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005393 Supported in default-server: Yes
5394
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005395id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005396 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5397 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5398 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005399
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005400 Supported in default-server: No
5401
5402inter <delay>
5403fastinter <delay>
5404downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005405 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5406 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5407 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5408 between checks depending on the server state :
5409
5410 Server state | Interval used
5411 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5412 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5413 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5414 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5415 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5416 or yet unchecked. |
5417 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5418 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5419 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005420
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005421 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5422 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5423 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5424 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5425 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5426 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5427 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5428 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5429 servers.
5430
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005431 Supported in default-server: Yes
5432
5433maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005434 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5435 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5436 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5437 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5438 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5439 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5440 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5441 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5442
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005443 Supported in default-server: Yes
5444
5445maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005446 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5447 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5448 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5449 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5450 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5451 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5452 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5453
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005454 Supported in default-server: Yes
5455
5456minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005457 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5458 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5459 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5460 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5461 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5462 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005463 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005464 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005465
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005466 Supported in default-server: Yes
5467
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005468observe <mode>
5469 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5470 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5471 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5472 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5473 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5474 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5475 headers, a timeout, etc.
5476
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005477 Supported in default-server: No
5478
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005479 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5480
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005481on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005482 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5483 Currently, four modes are available:
5484 - fastinter: force fastinter
5485 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5486 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5487 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5488 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5489
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005490 Supported in default-server: Yes
5491
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005492 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5493
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005494port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005495 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5496 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5497 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5498 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5499 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5500 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5501
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005502 Supported in default-server: Yes
5503
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005504redir <prefix>
5505 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5506 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5507 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5508 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5509 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5510 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5511 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5512 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005513 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005514 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5515 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5516 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5517 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5518 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5519
5520 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5521
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005522 Supported in default-server: No
5523
5524rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005525 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5526 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5527 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5528
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005529 Supported in default-server: Yes
5530
5531slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005532 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5533 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5534 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5535 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5536 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5537 parameters :
5538
5539 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5540 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5541
5542 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5543 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5544 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5545 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5546
5547 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5548 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5549 seen as failed.
5550
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005551 Supported in default-server: Yes
5552
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005553source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
5554source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005555 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5556 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5557 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5558 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5559
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005560 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5561 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5562 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5563 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5564 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5565 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5566 server.
5567
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005568 Supported in default-server: No
5569
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005570track [<proxy>/]<server>
5571 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5572 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5573 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5574 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5575 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5576
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005577 Supported in default-server: No
5578
5579weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005580 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5581 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5582 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005583 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5584 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5585 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5586 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5587 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5588 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005589
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005590 Supported in default-server: Yes
5591
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005592
55936. HTTP header manipulation
5594---------------------------
5595
5596In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5597response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5598request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5599which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5600against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5601to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5602passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5603headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5604never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5605
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005606There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5607(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5608rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5609messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5610in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005611happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005612add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5613normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5614
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005615This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5616in section 4.2 :
5617
5618 - reqadd <string>
5619 - reqallow <search>
5620 - reqiallow <search>
5621 - reqdel <search>
5622 - reqidel <search>
5623 - reqdeny <search>
5624 - reqideny <search>
5625 - reqpass <search>
5626 - reqipass <search>
5627 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5628 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5629 - reqtarpit <search>
5630 - reqitarpit <search>
5631 - rspadd <string>
5632 - rspdel <search>
5633 - rspidel <search>
5634 - rspdeny <search>
5635 - rspideny <search>
5636 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5637 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5638
5639With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5640is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5641parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5642prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5643Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5644
5645 \t for a tab
5646 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5647 \n for a new line (LF)
5648 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5649 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5650 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5651 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5652 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5653
5654The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5655portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5656above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5657regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
56589 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5659is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5660
5661The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5662after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5663
5664Notes related to these keywords :
5665---------------------------------
5666 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5667 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5668 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5669
5670 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5671 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5672 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5673
5674 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5675 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5676 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5677 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5678 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5679
5680 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5681 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5682 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5683 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5684 useless headers before adding new ones.
5685
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005686 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005687 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5688
5689 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5690 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5691 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5692
5693 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5694 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005695 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005696
5697
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010056987. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5699------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005700
5701The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5702content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5703from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5704simple :
5705
5706 - define test criteria with sets of values
5707 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5708
5709The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5710
5711In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5712
5713 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5714
5715This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5716Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5717and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5718an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5719of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5720
5721ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5722'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5723which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5724
5725There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5726performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5727
5728The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5729
5730 -i : ignore case during matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005731 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5732
5733Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005734
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005735 - integers or integer ranges
5736 - strings
5737 - regular expressions
5738 - IP addresses and networks
5739
5740
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057417.1. Matching integers
5742----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005743
5744Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5745that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5746expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5747may be omitted.
5748
5749For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5750unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5751representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5752
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005753As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5754two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5755instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5756ranges and operators.
5757
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005758For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005759operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5760Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5761of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005762
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005763Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005764
5765 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5766 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5767 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5768 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5769 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5770
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005771For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005772
5773 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5774
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005775This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5776
5777 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5778
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005779
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057807.2. Matching strings
5781---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005782
5783String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5784exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5785characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5786string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5787to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005788before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005789
5790
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057917.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5792-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005793
5794Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5795they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5796possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5797passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5798the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005799the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5800match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005801
5802
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058037.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5804----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005805
5806IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5807netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5808within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005809host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005810difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5811at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
5812does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
5813parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005814
5815
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058167.5. Available matching criteria
5817--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005818
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058197.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
5820------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005821
5822A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
5823analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
5824addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
5825
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005826always_false
5827 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5828 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5829
5830always_true
5831 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5832 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5833
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005834avg_queue <integer>
5835avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
5836 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
5837 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
5838 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
5839 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
5840 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
5841 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
5842 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
5843 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
5844 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
5845 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
5846 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01005847
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005848be_conn <integer>
5849be_conn(frontend) <integer>
5850 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
5851 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
5852 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5853 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
5854 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005855
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005856be_sess_rate <integer>
5857be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
5858 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
5859 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
5860 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
5861 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
5862 sucking of an online dictionary).
5863
5864 Example :
5865 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
5866 backend dynamic
5867 mode http
5868 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
5869 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005870
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005871connslots <integer>
5872connslots(backend) <integer>
5873 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005874 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005875 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
5876
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005877 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
5878 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005879
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005880 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005881 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
5882 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
5883 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
5884 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
5885 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005886 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005887
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005888 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
5889 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
5890 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
5891 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005892
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005893dst <ip_address>
5894 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
5895 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005896
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005897dst_conn <integer>
5898 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
5899 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
5900 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
5901 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
5902 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
5903 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
5904
5905dst_port <integer>
5906 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
5907 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
5908
5909fe_conn <integer>
5910fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
5911 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
5912 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
5913 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5914 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
5915 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
5916 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
5917 criteria.
5918
5919fe_id <integer>
Cyril Bonté78caf842010-03-10 22:41:43 +01005920 Applies to the frontend's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005921 frontend it was called.
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005922
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005923fe_sess_rate <integer>
5924fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
5925 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
5926 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
5927 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
5928 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
5929 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
5930 the rate to go down below the limit.
5931
5932 Example :
5933 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
5934 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
5935 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
5936 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
5937 frontend mail
5938 bind :25
5939 mode tcp
5940 maxconn 100
5941 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
5942 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
5943 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
5944 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005945
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005946nbsrv <integer>
5947nbsrv(backend) <integer>
5948 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
5949 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
5950 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
5951 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
5952 "monitor fail".
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005953
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01005954queue <integer>
5955queue(frontend) <integer>
5956 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
5957 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
5958 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
5959 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
5960 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
5961 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
5962 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5963
5964so_id <integer>
5965 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
5966
5967src <ip_address>
5968 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
5969 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
5970 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
5971
5972src_port <integer>
5973 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005974
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005975
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059767.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
5977-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005978
5979A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
5980during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
5981through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
5982for more detailed information on the subject.
5983
5984req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005985 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005986 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
5987 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
5988 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
5989 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
5990 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
5991 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
5992
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005993req_proto_http
5994 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
5995 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005996 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005997 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
5998 using TCP request content inspection rules.
5999
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006000req_rdp_cookie <string>
6001req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
6002 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
6003 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
6004 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
6005 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
6006 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
6007 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
6008 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
6009 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
6010
6011req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
6012req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
6013 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
6014 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
6015 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
6016 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
6017 cookies.
6018
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006019req_ssl_ver <decimal>
6020 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
6021 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
6022 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
6023 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
6024 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
6025 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
6026 with TCP request content inspection.
6027
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02006028wait_end
6029 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
6030 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
6031 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
6032 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
6033 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
6034 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
6035 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
6036 inspection.
6037
6038 Examples :
6039 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
6040 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
6041 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
6042
6043 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
6044 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
6045 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
6046 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
6047 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
6048 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
6049 tcp-request content reject
6050
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006051
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060527.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
6053--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006054
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006055A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006056application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
6057read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
6058than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
6059
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006060hdr <string>
6061hdr(header) <string>
6062 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6063 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
6064 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6065 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
6066 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6067
6068 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
6069 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
6070 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6071
6072 hdr(Connection) -i close
6073
6074hdr_beg <string>
6075hdr_beg(header) <string>
6076 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
6077 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6078 response headers sent by the server.
6079
6080hdr_cnt <integer>
6081hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6082 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6083 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6084 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6085 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
6086 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
6087 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6088 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6089
6090hdr_dir <string>
6091hdr_dir(header) <string>
6092 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6093 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6094 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
6095 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6096 headers sent by the server.
6097
6098hdr_dom <string>
6099hdr_dom(header) <string>
6100 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6101 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6102 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
6103 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6104 server.
6105
6106hdr_end <string>
6107hdr_end(header) <string>
6108 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
6109 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6110 response headers sent by the server.
6111
6112hdr_ip <ip_address>
6113hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6114 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6115 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
6116 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6117 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6118
6119hdr_reg <regex>
6120hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6121 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6122 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6123 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
6124 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6125 response headers sent by the server.
6126
6127hdr_sub <string>
6128hdr_sub(header) <string>
6129 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
6130 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6131 response headers sent by the server.
6132
6133hdr_val <integer>
6134hdr_val(header) <integer>
6135 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6136 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6137 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
6138 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
6139
6140http_auth(userlist)
6141http_auth_group(userlist) <group> [<group>]*
6142 Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
6143 username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
6144 use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
6145 of specified groups.
6146
6147 Currently only http basic auth is supported.
6148
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006149method <string>
6150 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
6151 already check for most common methods.
6152
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006153path <string>
6154 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
6155 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
6156 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
6157
6158path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006159 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6160 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006161
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006162path_dir <string>
6163 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6164 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6165 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6166 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6167
6168path_dom <string>
6169 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6170 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6171 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6172
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006173path_end <string>
6174 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6175 control file name extension.
6176
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006177path_reg <regex>
6178 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6179 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6180 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6181
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006182path_sub <string>
6183 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6184 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6185 "path_dir".
6186
6187req_ver <string>
6188 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
6189 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
6190
6191status <integer>
6192 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
6193 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
6194 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
6195
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006196url <string>
6197 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6198 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6199
6200url_beg <string>
6201 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6202 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6203
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006204url_dir <string>
6205 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6206 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6207 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6208 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6209
6210url_dom <string>
6211 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6212 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6213 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6214
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006215url_end <string>
6216 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6217 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006218
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006219url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006220 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6221 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006222 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006223
6224url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006225 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6226 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006227 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006228 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006229
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006230url_reg <regex>
6231 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6232 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6233 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006234
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006235url_sub <string>
6236 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6237 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006238
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006239
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062407.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6241---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006242
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006243Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6244every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
6245order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below. Please note that
6246only the first three ones are not layer 7 based.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006247
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006248ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6249---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006250FALSE always_false never match
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006251HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006252HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6253HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006254HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
6255HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
6256HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
6257HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6258LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006259METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6260METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6261METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6262METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6263METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6264METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006265RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006266REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01006267TRUE always_true always match
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006268WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6269---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006270
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006271
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062727.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6273----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006274
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006275Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6276combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006277
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006278 - AND (implicit)
6279 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6280 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006281
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006282A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006283
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006284 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006285
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006286Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6287indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006288
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006289For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6290"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6291requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6292is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006293
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006294 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6295 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6296 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6297 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006298
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006299To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6300and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006301
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006302 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6303 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6304 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6305 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006306
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006307 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6308 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6309 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6310 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006311
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006312It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6313expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6314be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6315the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6316
6317 The following rule :
6318
6319 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6320 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6321
6322 Can also be written that way :
6323
6324 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6325
6326It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6327to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6328simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6329sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6330good use is the following :
6331
6332 With named ACLs :
6333
6334 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6335 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6336 monitor fail if site_dead
6337
6338 With anonymous ACLs :
6339
6340 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6341
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006342See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006343
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006344
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010063457.8. Pattern extraction
6346-----------------------
6347
6348The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6349response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6350for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6351
6352All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6353"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6354begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6355arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6356much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6357equivalent used in ACLs.
6358
6359The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6360
6361 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6362 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6363
6364 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6365 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6366 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6367 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6368
6369 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6370 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6371 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6372 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6373 type integer and only works with such tables.
6374
6375
6376The currently available list of transformations include :
6377
6378 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6379 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6380 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6381
6382 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6383 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6384 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6385
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006386 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6387 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6388 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6389 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6390 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6391
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006392
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063938. Logging
6394----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006395
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006396One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6397provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6398very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6399provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6400state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006401to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006402headers.
6403
6404In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6405about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6406send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6407
6408 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6409 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6410 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6411 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6412 at the termination.
6413
6414The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6415allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6416as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6417while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6418real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6419delay.
6420
6421
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064228.1. Log levels
6423---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006424
6425TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6426source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6427HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6428in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6429particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006430syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006431facilities.
6432
6433
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064348.2. Log formats
6435----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006436
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006437HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006438and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6439the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6440formats are the following ones :
6441
6442 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6443 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6444 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6445 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6446 extents.
6447
6448 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6449 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6450 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6451 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6452 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6453
6454 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6455 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6456 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6457 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6458 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6459
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006460 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6461 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6462 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6463 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6464
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006465Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6466specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6467field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6468servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6469always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6470identifier.
6471
6472Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6473 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6474 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6475 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6476 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6477
6478
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064798.2.1. Default log format
6480-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006481
6482This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6483as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6484format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6485
6486 Example :
6487 listen www
6488 mode http
6489 log global
6490 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6491
6492 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6493 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6494 (www/HTTP)
6495
6496 Field Format Extract from the example above
6497 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6498 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6499 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6500 4 'to' to
6501 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6502 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6503
6504Detailed fields description :
6505 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6506 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6507 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6508 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6509 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6510 and processed the connection.
6511 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6512
6513It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6514will eventually disappear.
6515
6516
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065178.2.2. TCP log format
6518---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006519
6520The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6521is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6522information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6523counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6524emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6525environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6526the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6527sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006528specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6529not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6530fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6531marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006532
6533 Example :
6534 frontend fnt
6535 mode tcp
6536 option tcplog
6537 log global
6538 default_backend bck
6539
6540 backend bck
6541 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6542
6543 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6544 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6545 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6546
6547 Field Format Extract from the example above
6548 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6549 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6550 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6551 4 frontend_name fnt
6552 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6553 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6554 7 bytes_read* 212
6555 8 termination_state --
6556 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6557 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6558
6559Detailed fields description :
6560 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6561 connection to haproxy.
6562
6563 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6564
6565 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6566 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6567 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6568 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6569
6570 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6571 and processed the connection.
6572
6573 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6574 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6575 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6576 applications.
6577
6578 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6579 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6580 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6581 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6582 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6583
6584 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6585 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6586 See "Timers" below for more details.
6587
6588 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6589 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6590 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6591 "Timers" below for more details.
6592
6593 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6594 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6595 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6596 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6597 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6598 details.
6599
6600 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6601 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6602 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6603 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6604 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6605
6606 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6607 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6608 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6609 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6610 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6611 for more details.
6612
6613 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6614 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6615 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6616 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6617 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006618 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006619
6620 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6621 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6622 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6623 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6624 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6625 caused by a denial of service attack.
6626
6627 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6628 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6629 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6630 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6631 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6632 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6633 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6634 denial of service attack.
6635
6636 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6637 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6638 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6639 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6640 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6641 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6642 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6643 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6644 be processed than on other servers.
6645
6646 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6647 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6648 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6649 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6650 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6651 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6652 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6653 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6654 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6655 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6656 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6657 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6658 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6659
6660 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6661 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6662 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6663 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6664 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6665 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6666 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6667 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6668
6669 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6670 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6671 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6672 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6673 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6674 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6675 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6676 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6677 occurs.
6678
6679
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066808.2.3. HTTP log format
6681----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006682
6683The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6684is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6685the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6686are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6687emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6688generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6689"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6690which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006691frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6692is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006693
6694Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6695slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6696with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6697
6698 Example :
6699 frontend http-in
6700 mode http
6701 option httplog
6702 log global
6703 default_backend bck
6704
6705 backend static
6706 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6707
6708 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6709 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6710 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006711 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006712
6713 Field Format Extract from the example above
6714 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6715 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6716 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6717 4 frontend_name http-in
6718 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6719 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6720 7 status_code 200
6721 8 bytes_read* 2750
6722 9 captured_request_cookie -
6723 10 captured_response_cookie -
6724 11 termination_state ----
6725 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6726 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6727 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6728 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6729 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006730
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006731
6732Detailed fields description :
6733 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6734 connection to haproxy.
6735
6736 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6737
6738 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6739 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6740 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6741 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6742 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6743
6744 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6745 and processed the connection.
6746
6747 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6748 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6749 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6750
6751 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6752 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6753 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6754 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6755 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6756 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6757
6758 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6759 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6760 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6761 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6762 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6763 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6764
6765 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6766 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6767 See "Timers" below for more details.
6768
6769 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6770 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6771 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6772 below for more details.
6773
6774 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
6775 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
6776 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
6777 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
6778 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
6779 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
6780 for more details.
6781
6782 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6783 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6784 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6785 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6786 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6787 details.
6788
6789 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
6790 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
6791 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
6792
6793 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
6794 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
6795 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
6796 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
6797 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
6798 overflowing.
6799
6800 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
6801 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
6802 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
6803 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
6804 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
6805 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
6806 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
6807 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6808
6809 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
6810 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
6811 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
6812 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
6813 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
6814 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
6815 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
6816 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6817
6818 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6819 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6820 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
6821 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
6822 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
6823 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
6824 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
6825
6826 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6827 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6828 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
6829 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
6830 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006831 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006832 system.
6833
6834 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6835 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6836 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6837 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6838 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6839 caused by a denial of service attack.
6840
6841 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6842 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6843 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6844 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6845 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6846 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6847 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6848 denial of service attack.
6849
6850 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6851 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6852 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6853 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6854 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6855 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6856 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6857 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
6858 processed than on other servers.
6859
6860 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6861 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6862 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6863 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6864 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6865 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6866 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6867 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6868 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6869 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6870 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6871 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6872 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6873
6874 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6875 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6876 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6877 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6878 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6879 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6880 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6881 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6882
6883 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6884 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6885 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6886 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6887 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6888 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6889 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6890 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6891 occurs.
6892
6893 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
6894 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
6895 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
6896 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
6897 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
6898 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
6899 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
6900 cookies" below for more details.
6901
6902 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
6903 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
6904 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
6905 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
6906 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
6907 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
6908 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
6909 and cookies" below for more details.
6910
6911 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
6912 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
6913 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
6914 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
6915 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
6916 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
6917 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
6918 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
6919
6920
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069218.3. Advanced logging options
6922-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006923
6924Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
6925just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
6926options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
6927for more information about their usage.
6928
6929
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069308.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
6931------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006932
6933It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
6934haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
6935commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
6936monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
6937ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
6938
6939 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
6940 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
6941 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
6942 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
6943
6944 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
6945 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
6946 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
6947 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
6948 such as other load-balancers.
6949
6950 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
6951 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
6952 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
6953
6954
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069558.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
6956----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006957
6958The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
6959what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
6960or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
6961"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
6962just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
6963log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
6964after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
6965is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
6966with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
6967with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
6968
6969
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069708.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
6971------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006972
6973Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
6974for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
6975"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
6976retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
6977raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
6978a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
6979file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
6980you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
6981"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
6982
6983
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069848.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
6985--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006986
6987Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
6988multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
6989them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
6990"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
6991logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
6992error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
6993and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
6994too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
6995useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
6996alternative.
6997
6998
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069998.4. Timing events
7000------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007001
7002Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
7003reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
7004the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
7005frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
7006mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
7007
7008 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
7009 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
7010 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
7011 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
7012 the client closes prematurely or times out.
7013
7014 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
7015 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
7016 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
7017 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
7018 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
7019
7020 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
7021 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
7022 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
7023 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
7024 connection never established.
7025
7026 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
7027 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
7028 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
7029 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
7030 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
7031 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
7032 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
7033 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
7034 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
7035 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
7036 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
7037
7038 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
7039 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
7040 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
7041 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
7042 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
7043
7044 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
7045
7046 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
7047 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
7048 negative.
7049
7050These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
7051protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
7052that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007053due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007054close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
7055session has been aborted on timeout.
7056
7057Most common cases :
7058
7059 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7060 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
7061 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
7062 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
7063 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
7064 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
7065 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
7066 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
7067 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
7068 connections have been accepted at once.
7069
7070 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7071 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
7072 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
7073 of ms on remote networks.
7074
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007075 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
7076 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
7077 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007078
7079 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
7080 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
7081 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
7082 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
7083 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
7084 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
7085 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
7086 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
7087 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
7088 to the server until another one is released.
7089
7090Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7091
7092 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7093 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7094 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7095
7096 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7097 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7098 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7099
7100 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7101 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7102 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7103 flags.
7104
7105 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7106 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7107 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7108 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7109 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7110 the client connection was maintained open.
7111
7112 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7113 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7114 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7115 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7116
7117
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071188.5. Session state at disconnection
7119-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007120
7121TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7122"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
71232-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7124each of which has a special meaning :
7125
7126 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7127 session to terminate :
7128
7129 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7130
7131 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7132 server explicitly refused it.
7133
7134 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7135 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7136 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7137 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7138 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7139 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7140
7141 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7142 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7143 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7144 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7145 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7146
7147 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7148 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7149 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7150 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7151 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7152
7153 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7154 send or receive data.
7155
7156 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7157 send or receive data.
7158
7159 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7160 with nothing left in the buffers.
7161
7162 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7163
7164 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7165 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7166
7167 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7168 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7169 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7170 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7171 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7172
7173 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7174 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7175
7176 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7177 server (HTTP only).
7178
7179 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7180
7181 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7182 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7183 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7184
7185 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7186 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7187 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7188
7189 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7190
7191 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7192 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7193
7194 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7195 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7196 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7197
7198 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7199 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
7200 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, or an attack.
7201
7202 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7203 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7204 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7205 another server.
7206
7207 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7208 server.
7209
7210 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7211
7212 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7213 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7214
7215 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7216
7217 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7218 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7219 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7220
7221 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7222
7223 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7224 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7225
7226 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7227
7228 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7229
7230The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7231happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7232helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7233starvation, attacks, etc...
7234
7235The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7236alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7237easier finding and understanding.
7238
7239 Flags Reason
7240
7241 -- Normal termination.
7242
7243 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7244 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7245 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7246 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7247
7248 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7249 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7250 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7251 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7252 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7253 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007254
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007255 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7256 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7257 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7258
7259 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7260 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7261 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7262
7263 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7264 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7265 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7266 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7267 the server takes too long to respond.
7268
7269 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7270 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7271 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7272 long a time to respond.
7273
7274 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7275 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7276 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7277 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7278 and the client.
7279
7280 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7281 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7282 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7283 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7284 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7285 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7286
7287 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7288 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007289 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7290 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7291 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7292 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007293
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007294 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007295 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7296 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7297 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7298 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7299 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7300
7301 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7302 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7303 503 or 504 here.
7304
7305 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7306 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7307 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7308 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7309 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7310
7311 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7312 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007313 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007314 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7315 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7316
7317 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7318 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7319 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7320 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7321 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7322 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7323 between haproxy and the server.
7324
7325 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7326 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7327 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7328 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7329 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7330 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7331 solution is to fix the application.
7332
7333 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7334 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7335 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7336 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7337 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7338 external attacks.
7339
7340 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7341 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7342 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7343 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7344 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7345
7346 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7347 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7348 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7349 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7350 containing unauthorized characters.
7351
7352 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7353 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7354 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7355 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7356
7357 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7358 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7359 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7360 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7361
7362 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7363 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7364 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7365 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7366
7367
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073688.6. Non-printable characters
7369-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007370
7371In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7372consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7373converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7374prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7375being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7376escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7377is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7378'}' when logging headers.
7379
7380Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7381issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7382containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7383
7384Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7385the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7386performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7387
7388
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073898.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7390---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007391
7392Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7393achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007394section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007395cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7396the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7397the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007398locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007399not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7400user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7401a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7402wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7403
7404 Examples :
7405 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7406 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7407
7408 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7409 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7410
7411
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074128.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7413---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007414
7415Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7416proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7417the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7418server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7419
7420Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7421response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007422section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007423
7424It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007425time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7426appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007427are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7428and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7429follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7430request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7431in the logs.
7432
7433 Example :
7434 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7435 listen proxy-out
7436 mode http
7437 option httplog
7438 option logasap
7439 log global
7440 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7441
7442 # log the name of the virtual server
7443 capture request header Host len 20
7444
7445 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7446 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7447
7448 # log the beginning of the referrer
7449 capture request header Referer len 20
7450
7451 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7452 capture response header Server len 20
7453
7454 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7455 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7456
7457 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7458 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7459
7460 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7461 capture response header Via len 20
7462
7463 # log the URL location during a redirection
7464 capture response header Location len 20
7465
7466 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7467 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7468 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7469 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7470 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7471
7472 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7473 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7474 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7475 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007476 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007477
7478 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7479 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7480 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7481 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7482 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007483 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007484
7485
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074868.9. Examples of logs
7487---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007488
7489These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7490them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7491reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7492
7493 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7494 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7495 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7496
7497 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7498 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7499
7500 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7501 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7502 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7503
7504 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7505 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7506
7507 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7508 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7509 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7510
7511 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007512 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007513 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7514 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7515
7516 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7517 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7518 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7519
7520 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7521 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7522 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7523 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7524 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7525 to return the 502 and not the server.
7526
7527 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007528 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007529
7530 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7531 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7532 Nothing was sent to any server.
7533
7534 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7535 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7536
7537 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7538 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7539 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7540 send a 408 return code to the client.
7541
7542 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7543 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7544
7545 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7546 5 seconds ("c----").
7547
7548 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7549 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007550 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007551
7552 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007553 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007554 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7555 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7556 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7557 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7558 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007559
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007560
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075619. Statistics and monitoring
7562----------------------------
7563
7564It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7565mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7566CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7567Unix socket.
7568
7569
75709.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007571---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007572
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007573The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7574page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7575
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007576 0. pxname: proxy name
7577 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7578 for server)
7579 2. qcur: current queued requests
7580 3. qmax: max queued requests
7581 4. scur: current sessions
7582 5. smax: max sessions
7583 6. slim: sessions limit
7584 7. stot: total sessions
7585 8. bin: bytes in
7586 9. bout: bytes out
7587 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007588 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007589 12. ereq: request errors
7590 13. econ: connection errors
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007591 14. eresp: response errors (among which srv_abrt)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007592 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7593 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
Cyril Bonté0dae5852010-02-03 00:26:28 +01007594 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/NOLB/MAINT/MAINT(via)...)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007595 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7596 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7597 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7598 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7599 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7600 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7601 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7602 25. qlimit: queue limit
7603 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7604 27. iid: unique proxy id
7605 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7606 29. throttle: warm up status
7607 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7608 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007609 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007610 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7611 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7612 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007613 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01007614 UNK -> unknown
7615 INI -> initializing
7616 SOCKERR -> socket error
7617 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7618 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7619 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example
7620 "Connection refused" (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7621 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7622 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
7623 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
7624 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7625 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7626 disable-on-404
7627 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
7628 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
7629 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007630 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7631 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007632 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7633 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7634 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7635 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7636 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7637 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007638 45. hanafail: failed health checks details
7639 46. req_rate: HTTP requests per second over last elapsed second
7640 47. req_rate_max: max number of HTTP requests per second observed
7641 48. req_tot: total number of HTTP requests received
Willy Tarreauae526782010-03-04 20:34:23 +01007642 49. cli_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the client
7643 50. srv_abrt: number of data transfers aborted by the server (inc. in eresp)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007644
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007645
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076469.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007647-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007648
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007649The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007650must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7651is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7652a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7653risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7654followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7655given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7656then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7657to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007658
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007659It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7660on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7661own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007662
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007663clear counters
7664 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7665 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7666 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
7667 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7668 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7669
7670clear counters all
7671 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
7672 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7673 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7674
7675disable server <backend>/<server>
7676 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7677 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7678 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7679 during the maintenance.
7680
7681 In the statistics page, a server DOWN for maintenance will appear with a
7682 "MAINT" status, its tracking servers with the "MAINT(via)" one.
7683
7684 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7685 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7686
7687 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7688 level "admin".
7689
7690enable server <backend>/<server>
7691 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7692 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7693
7694 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7695 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7696
7697 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7698 level "admin".
7699
7700get weight <backend>/<server>
7701 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7702 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7703 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
7704 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7705 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7706 dash ('#').
7707
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007708help
7709 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7710 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007711
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007712prompt
7713 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7714 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7715 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7716 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7717 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7718 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7719 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7720 command.
7721
7722quit
7723 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007724
Willy Tarreaud63335a2010-02-26 12:56:52 +01007725set timeout cli <delay>
7726 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7727 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7728 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7729
7730set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7731 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7732 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7733 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7734 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7735 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7736 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7737 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7738 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7739 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7740 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7741 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
7742 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7743 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7744 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7745
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007746show errors [<iid>]
7747 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7748 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007749 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7750 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7751 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007752
7753 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7754 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7755 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7756 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7757 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7758 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7759 are reported too.
7760
7761 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7762 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7763 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7764 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7765 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7766 code.
7767
7768 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7769 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7770 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7771 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7772 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
7773 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
7774 line.
7775
7776 Example :
7777 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
7778 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
7779 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
7780 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
7781
7782 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
7783 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
7784 00038 Location: blah\r\n
7785 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
7786 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
7787 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
7788 00204+ minal\r\n
7789 00211 \r\n
7790
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007791 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007792 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
7793 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
7794 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
7795 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
7796 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
7797 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007798
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007799show info
7800 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
7801
7802show sess
7803 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007804 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
7805 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7806
Willy Tarreau66dc20a2010-03-05 17:53:32 +01007807show sess <id>
7808 Display a lot of internal information about the specified session identifier.
7809 This identifier is the first field at the beginning of the lines in the dumps
7810 of "show sess" (it corresponds to the session pointer). Those information are
7811 useless to most users but may be used by haproxy developers to troubleshoot a
7812 complex bug. The output format is intentionally not documented so that it can
7813 freely evolve depending on demands.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007814
7815show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
7816 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
7817 possible to dump only selected items :
7818 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
7819 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
7820 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
7821 for example:
7822 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
7823 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
7824 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
7825
7826 Example :
7827 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
7828 Name: HAProxy
7829 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
7830 Release_date: 2009/09/23
7831 Nbproc: 1
7832 Process_num: 1
7833 (...)
7834
7835 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
7836 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
7837 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
7838 (...)
7839 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
7840
7841 $
7842
7843 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
7844 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
7845 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
7846 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007847 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007848
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007849
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01007850/*
7851 * Local variables:
7852 * fill-column: 79
7853 * End:
7854 */